1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
In Stock & Ready to Ship | Lead Time: 4–8 Weeks | RTO from $49/mo

RV Covers For Sale

Shop 35+ prefab steel carport sizes from $1,195. Regular, A-Frame & vertical roof styles in 12 or 14 gauge. Free delivery & professional installation on every tubular steel order across all 48 states.

$1,195
Starting Price
35+
Sizes In Stock
20yr
Warranty — 12ga
48
States Covered
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1521–1560 of 2330 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Sage green prefab metal building cottage shed with white doors surrounded by flower gardens

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover, built for daily backyard use.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of everyday lawn & garden equipment cover space. Zero-turn mower parked next to a push mower, with string trimmers on wall hooks and a potting bench against the gable, all fit inside this layout.

You’re viewing:Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Vertical Roof
  • Galvalume Trim
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-LAWN-GARDEN-EQUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. 12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of everyday lawn & garden equipment cover space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft shop

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover layout.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of everyday lawn & garden equipment cover space. Zero-turn mower parked next to a push mower, with string trimmers on wall hooks and a potting bench against the gable, all fit inside this layout with walking room left over. Gardeners running a small property use the long 30-foot wall for double sliding barn doors so a sub-compact tractor can drive straight in. Galvalume trim shrugs off fertilizer and irrigation overspray.

💡 Pro tip:Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday lawn & garden equipment cover
Everyday lawn & garden equipment cover
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a lawn & garden equipment cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlawn & garden equipment cover + seasonal storage
lawn & garden equipment cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover cost?

A 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud lawn & garden equipment cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud lawn & garden equipment cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green prefab metal building cottage shed with white doors surrounded by flower gardens

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Muted charcoal prefab metal building yoga studio with monitor style windows and glass doors

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Workshop / Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×32 workshop / hobby room? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists building a woodshop, leather studio, or model railroad layout use the 12×32.

You’re viewing:Workshop / Hobby Room·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 2 Windows Std
  • Insulated Walk-In
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 workshop / hobby room.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Looking for a 12×32 workshop / hobby room? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

Workshop / Hobby Room layout.

Looking for a 12×32 workshop / hobby room? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists building a woodshop, leather studio, or model railroad layout use the 12×32 enclosed for a dedicated 384 sq ft workspace. Insulated walls plus a mini-split keep it usable year-round. Two 12×32 windows on the long wall pull in natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Workshop / Hobby Room works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop / hobby room
Everyday workshop / hobby room
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop / hobby room + seasonal storage
workshop / hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 workshop / hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop / Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop / Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 workshop / hobby room cost?

A 12×32 workshop / hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 workshop / hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop / hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 workshop / hobby room?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 workshop / hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 workshop / hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 workshop / hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 workshop / hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 workshop / hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 workshop / hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 workshop / hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 workshop / hobby room typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Muted charcoal prefab metal building yoga studio with monitor style windows and glass doors

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building kit office studio with black metal roof and three large windows

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Home Office / Backyard Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×32 home office / backyard studio? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready.

You’re viewing:Home Office / Backyard Studio·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Package
  • HOA-Friendly Colors
  • French Door Option
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-HOME-OFFICE-BACKBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 home office / backyard studio.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Looking for a 12×32 home office / backyard studio? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

Home Office / Backyard Studio layout.

Looking for a 12×32 home office / backyard studio? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready interior, and a 36" entry door. 384 sq ft fits a desk zone, lounge corner, and a small kitchenette wall. Add wainscoting and Pewter Gray walls for residential curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office / Backyard Studio works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office / Backyard Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office / Backyard Studio spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office / Backyard Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home office / backyard studio
Everyday home office / backyard studio
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office / backyard studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office / backyard studio + seasonal storage
home office / backyard studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 home office / backyard studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office / Backyard Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office / Backyard Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office / Backyard Studio also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office / Backyard Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 home office / backyard studio cost?

A 12×32 home office / backyard studio from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 home office / backyard studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office / backyard studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 home office / backyard studio?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office / backyard studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 home office / backyard studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 home office / backyard studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 home office / backyard studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 home office / backyard studio.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 home office / backyard studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 home office / backyard studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 home office / backyard studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 home office / backyard studio typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office / Backyard Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building kit office studio with black metal roof and three large windows

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red steel barn with white sliding doors and round hay bales stacked beside it

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover | Steel and Stud, From $6,300

12

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,200$6,300SAVE $900
or $131/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Hay & Feed Storage Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover, built for farm and ranch demands.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage cover space. Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 12×32 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain. Three-side enclosure with the long side.

You’re viewing:Hay & Feed Storage Cover·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,300$7,200Save $900
or as low as $131/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,950
12×32
this size
$6,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 3-Side Enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • 65 PSF Snow
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-HAY-FEED-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 hay & feed storage cover.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. 12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage cover space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

Hay & Feed Storage Cover layout.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage cover space. Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 12×32 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain. Three-side enclosure with the long side open lets you back a flatbed straight up. Vertical roof prevents water pooling on long runs.

💡 Pro tip:Hay & Feed Storage Cover works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Feed Storage Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Feed Storage Cover spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Feed Storage Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday hay & feed storage cover
Everyday hay & feed storage cover
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & feed storage cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay & feed storage cover + seasonal storage
hay & feed storage cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$131/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 hay & feed storage cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $131/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Feed Storage Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay & Feed Storage Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay & Feed Storage Cover also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay & Feed Storage Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover cost?

A 12×32 hay & feed storage cover from Steel and Stud starts at $6,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $131/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 hay & feed storage cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & feed storage cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay & feed storage cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $131/month on a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 hay & feed storage cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 hay & feed storage cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×32 hay & feed storage cover stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Feed Storage Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red steel barn with white sliding doors and round hay bales stacked beside it

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel garage at dusk with black roll-up door as a rider walks his Harley

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Two side-by-sides parked nose-to-tail, or a UTV plus 2 ATVs plus a gear wall, all.

You’re viewing:ATV & Side-by-Side Garage·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Mud-Friendly Galvalume
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-ATV-SIDE-BY-SIDEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage layout.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Two side-by-sides parked nose-to-tail, or a UTV plus 2 ATVs plus a gear wall, all inside 384 sq ft. Roll-up door on the gable end lets you ride in and out without dismounting. Common spec for hunting cabins and rural hobbyists.

💡 Pro tip:ATV & Side-by-Side Garage works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV & Side-by-Side Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv & side-by-side garage
Everyday atv & side-by-side garage
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv & side-by-side garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv & side-by-side garage + seasonal storage
atv & side-by-side garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV & Side-by-Side Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV & Side-by-Side Garage also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage cost?

A 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv & side-by-side garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv & side-by-side garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a atv & side-by-side garage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel garage at dusk with black roll-up door as a rider walks his Harley

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure pool cabana with teal trim and french doors among tropical palms

12×32 Pool House / Cabana

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Pool House / Cabana | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Pool House / Cabana
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Pool House / Cabana

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Pool House / Cabana, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 pool house / cabana packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with an in-ground pool use the 12×32 as a pool house with a covered changing room.

You’re viewing:Pool House / Cabana·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • Partial Enclosure
  • Custom Color Match
  • French Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-POOL-HOUSE-CABANBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 pool house / cabana.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 pool house / cabana packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft ADU

Pool House / Cabana layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 pool house / cabana packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with an in-ground pool use the 12×32 as a pool house with a covered changing room, equipment storage, and a shaded lounge zone. Split it 12×32 enclosed plus a 12×32 open-side cover, same building, two functions.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House / Cabana works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Pool House / Cabana in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House / Cabana.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House / Cabana spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House / Cabana.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house / cabana
Everyday pool house / cabana
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house / cabana.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house / cabana + seasonal storage
pool house / cabana + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Pool House / Cabana, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 pool house / cabana is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House / Cabana shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Pool House / Cabana buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Pool House / Cabana

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House / Cabana · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House / Cabana also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House / Cabana questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 pool house / cabana cost?

A 12×32 pool house / cabana from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 pool house / cabana price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house / cabana ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 pool house / cabana?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house / cabana different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 pool house / cabana need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 pool house / cabana delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 pool house / cabana without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 pool house / cabana.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 pool house / cabana?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 pool house / cabana in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 pool house / cabana add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 pool house / cabana typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House / Cabana quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure pool cabana with teal trim and french doors among tropical palms

12×32 Pool House / Cabana

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Equipment shed interior of a steel structure with John Deere compact tractor and tool storage

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Tool Shed for Contractors

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 tool shed for contractors packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Self-employed trades use this as a locked tool shed at home: ladders, pipe stock.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed for Contractors·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Deadbolt + Wi-Fi
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-TOOL-SHED-CONTRABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 tool shed for contractors.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 tool shed for contractors packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

Tool Shed for Contractors layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 tool shed for contractors packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Self-employed trades use this as a locked tool shed at home: ladders, pipe stock, compressor, miter saw station, and stacked totes. The 12×32 roll-up swallows a full sheet of plywood flat. Slide bolt plus deadbolt plus Wi-Fi opener keeps it secure overnight.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed for Contractors works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed for Contractors.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed for Contractors spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed for Contractors.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed for contractors
Everyday tool shed for contractors
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed for contractors.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed for contractors + seasonal storage
tool shed for contractors + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 tool shed for contractors is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed for Contractors shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed for Contractors · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed for Contractors also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed for Contractors questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 tool shed for contractors cost?

A 12×32 tool shed for contractors from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 tool shed for contractors price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed for contractors ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 tool shed for contractors?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed for contractors different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 tool shed for contractors need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 tool shed for contractors delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 tool shed for contractors without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 tool shed for contractors.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 tool shed for contractors?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 tool shed for contractors in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 tool shed for contractors add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 tool shed for contractors typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed for Contractors quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Equipment shed interior of a steel structure with John Deere compact tractor and tool storage

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel carport jet ski cover attached to yellow shed roof building near marina sailboats

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To | Steel and Stud, From $6,300

12

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,200$6,300SAVE $900
or $131/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Tractor & Implement Lean-To

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To, built for farm and ranch demands.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged tractor & implement lean-to space. Open gable ends let you drive straight through.

You’re viewing:Tractor & Implement Lean-To·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,300$7,200Save $900
or as low as $131/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,950
12×32
this size
$6,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • Lean-To Config
  • Attaches To Existing
  • Open Gables
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-TRACTOR-IMPLEMENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. 12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged tractor & implement lean-to space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft shop

Tractor & Implement Lean-To layout.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged tractor & implement lean-to space. Open gable ends let you drive straight through.

💡 Pro tip:Tractor & Implement Lean-To works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor & Implement Lean-To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor & Implement Lean-To spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor & Implement Lean-To.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor & implement lean-to
Everyday tractor & implement lean-to
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor & implement lean-to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor & implement lean-to + seasonal storage
tractor & implement lean-to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$131/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $131/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor & Implement Lean-To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tractor & Implement Lean-To · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor & Implement Lean-To also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor & Implement Lean-To questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to cost?

A 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to from Steel and Stud starts at $6,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $131/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor & implement lean-to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor & implement lean-to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $131/month on a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor & Implement Lean-To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel carport jet ski cover attached to yellow shed roof building near marina sailboats

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building with black trim and open roll-up in saguaro desert

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Single-Vehicle Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Our 14×25 single-vehicle garage fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners pick this footprint when they want enclosed parking for a.

You’re viewing:Single-Vehicle Garage·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • 9×8 Roll-Up Door
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-SINGLE-VEHICLE-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 single-vehicle garage.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 14×25 single-vehicle garage fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft

Single-Vehicle Garage layout.

Our 14×25 single-vehicle garage fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners pick this footprint when they want enclosed parking for a full-size pickup or SUV with real walking room down both sides. 14 feet clears an F-150 mirror-to-mirror with about 18 inches of breathing room each side, and the 24-foot length leaves 4-5 feet behind the tailgate for storage shelves.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Vehicle Garage works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Vehicle Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Vehicle Garage spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Vehicle Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday single-vehicle garage
Everyday single-vehicle garage
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-vehicle garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-vehicle garage + seasonal storage
single-vehicle garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 single-vehicle garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Vehicle Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Vehicle Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Vehicle Garage also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Vehicle Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 single-vehicle garage cost?

A 14×25 single-vehicle garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 single-vehicle garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-vehicle garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 single-vehicle garage?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-vehicle garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 single-vehicle garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 single-vehicle garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 single-vehicle garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 single-vehicle garage.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 single-vehicle garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 single-vehicle garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 single-vehicle garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 single-vehicle garage typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Vehicle Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building with black trim and open roll-up in saguaro desert

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with green wainscoting, green roll-up door and white entry

14×25 Backyard Workshop

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Backyard Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Backyard Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Backyard Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Backyard Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Our 14×25 backyard workshop fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Hobbyists building a dedicated woodworking or metal shop find 14×25 hits the.

You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation Ready
  • 30×30 Windows
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 backyard workshop.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 14×25 backyard workshop fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft

Backyard Workshop layout.

Our 14×25 backyard workshop fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Hobbyists building a dedicated woodworking or metal shop find 14×25 hits the right balance: enough wall length for a 12-foot workbench plus tool storage, but small enough to skip commercial zoning in most counties. The taller 12-foot leg height accommodates dust collection ducting and overhead lighting.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Workshop works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Backyard Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Workshop spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard workshop
Everyday backyard workshop
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard workshop + seasonal storage
backyard workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Backyard Workshop, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 backyard workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Backyard Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Backyard Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Workshop also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 backyard workshop cost?

A 14×25 backyard workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 backyard workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 backyard workshop?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 backyard workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 backyard workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 backyard workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 backyard workshop.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 backyard workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 backyard workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 backyard workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 backyard workshop typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with green wainscoting, green roll-up door and white entry

14×25 Backyard Workshop

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy steel structure with black roll-up door and white entry door near a wooded lake

14×25 Storage Shed

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Storage Shed | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Storage Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Storage Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Storage Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 14×25 storage shed? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Small property owners who’ve outgrown a 14×25 plastic shed step up to a 14×25 steel storage shed.

You’re viewing:Storage Shed·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume Finish
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-STORAGE-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 storage shed.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Looking for a 14×25 storage shed? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft shop

Storage Shed layout.

Looking for a 14×25 storage shed? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Small property owners who’ve outgrown a 14×25 plastic shed step up to a 14×25 steel storage shed to consolidate lawn equipment, seasonal gear, and household overflow. The 350 sq ft footprint holds a riding mower, two push mowers, a snowblower, and still leaves a back wall for shelving.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Shed works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Storage Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Shed spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday storage shed
Everyday storage shed
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage shed + seasonal storage
storage shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Storage Shed, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 storage shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Storage Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Storage Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Shed also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 storage shed cost?

A 14×25 storage shed from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 storage shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 storage shed?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 storage shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 storage shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 storage shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 storage shed.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 storage shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 storage shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 storage shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 storage shed typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy steel structure with black roll-up door and white entry door near a wooded lake

14×25 Storage Shed

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sand colored prefab metal building pool house with wood accent wall and french doors at evening

14×25 Pool House

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Pool House | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Pool House
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Pool House

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Pool House, built for daily backyard use.

Our 14×25 pool house fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners with backyard pools convert a 14×25 prefab building into a changing room.

You’re viewing:Pool House·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • Custom Color Match
  • French Doors
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-POOL-HOUSEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 pool house.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 14×25 pool house fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft ADU

Pool House layout.

Our 14×25 pool house fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners with backyard pools convert a 14×25 prefab building into a changing room, pump house, and covered patio combo. Split the interior with a partition wall: 10 feet of enclosed storage for chemicals and equipment, 14 feet of open lounge space facing the pool deck.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Pool House in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house
Everyday pool house
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house + seasonal storage
pool house + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Pool House, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 pool house is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Pool House buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Pool House

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 pool house cost?

A 14×25 pool house from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 pool house price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 pool house?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 pool house need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 pool house delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 pool house without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 pool house.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 pool house?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 pool house in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 pool house add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 pool house typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sand colored prefab metal building pool house with wood accent wall and french doors at evening

14×25 Pool House

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal shed converted to backyard office studio with black trim and large windows

14×25 Home Office Studio

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Home Office Studio | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Home Office Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Home Office Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Home Office Studio, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 14×25 home office studio? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers and creatives use the 14×25 footprint as a detached home office or art studio.

You’re viewing:Home Office Studio·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulated
  • Walk-In Door
  • 30×30 Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-HOME-OFFICE-STUDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 home office studio.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Looking for a 14×25 home office studio? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft

Home Office Studio layout.

Looking for a 14×25 home office studio? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers and creatives use the 14×25 footprint as a detached home office or art studio away from the main house. The 14-foot width fits a full desk wall plus a small meeting area, and R-19 batt insulation with a vapor barrier turns the steel shell into year-round climate-controlled space.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office Studio works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Home Office Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office Studio spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home office studio
Everyday home office studio
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office studio + seasonal storage
home office studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Home Office Studio, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 home office studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Home Office Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Home Office Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office Studio also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 home office studio cost?

A 14×25 home office studio from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 home office studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 home office studio?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 home office studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 home office studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 home office studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 home office studio.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 home office studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 home office studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 home office studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 home office studio typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal shed converted to backyard office studio with black trim and large windows

14×25 Home Office Studio

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel structure interior with pass-through bays holding a red tractor and Bobcat skid steer

14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed | Steel and Stud, From $5,800

12

14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,600$5,800SAVE $800
or $121/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Tractor & Equipment Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Small-acreage farmers and gardeners cover a compact tractor, attachments, and hay storage.

You’re viewing:Tractor & Equipment Shed·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,800$6,600Save $800
or as low as $121/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$5,600
14×25
this size
$5,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • Lean-To Ready
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Open Sidewall
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-TRACTOR-EQUIPMENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 tractor & equipment shed.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Looking for a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft shop

Tractor & Equipment Shed layout.

Looking for a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Small-acreage farmers and gardeners cover a compact tractor, attachments, and hay storage under one 14×25 roof. The 14-foot leg height clears most sub-compact tractors with a loader arm raised, and a lean-to addition on the 24-foot sidewall handles overflow implement storage.

💡 Pro tip:Tractor & Equipment Shed works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor & Equipment Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor & Equipment Shed spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor & Equipment Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor & equipment shed
Everyday tractor & equipment shed
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor & equipment shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor & equipment shed + seasonal storage
tractor & equipment shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$121/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 tractor & equipment shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $121/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor & Equipment Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tractor & Equipment Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor & Equipment Shed also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor & Equipment Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed cost?

A 14×25 tractor & equipment shed from Steel and Stud starts at $5,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $121/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 tractor & equipment shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor & equipment shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor & equipment shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $121/month on a 14×25 tractor & equipment shed.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 tractor & equipment shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 tractor & equipment shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 14×25 tractor & equipment shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor & Equipment Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel structure interior with pass-through bays holding a red tractor and Bobcat skid steer

14×25 Tractor & Equipment Shed

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal building kit cabin with porch and American flag overlooking a mountain sunrise

14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Hunting Cabin Shell

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 14×25 hunting cabin shell fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Hunters and weekend cabin owners use a 14×25 steel building as a base-camp shell.

You’re viewing:Hunting Cabin Shell·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • Gravel Anchor Kit
  • Insulation Ready
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-HUNTING-CABIN-SHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 hunting cabin shell.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 14×25 hunting cabin shell fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑14′ × 25′ · 350 ground + loft

Hunting Cabin Shell layout.

Our 14×25 hunting cabin shell fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Hunters and weekend cabin owners use a 14×25 steel building as a base-camp shell on remote acreage. The pre-engineered frame ships in 4-6 weeks, anchors to a packed-gravel pad, and gives you 350 sq ft to finish out with a bunk wall, kitchenette, and wood stove on your timeline.

💡 Pro tip:Hunting Cabin Shell works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hunting Cabin Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hunting Cabin Shell spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hunting Cabin Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday hunting cabin shell
Everyday hunting cabin shell
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hunting cabin shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhunting cabin shell + seasonal storage
hunting cabin shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 hunting cabin shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hunting Cabin Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hunting Cabin Shell · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hunting Cabin Shell also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hunting Cabin Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 hunting cabin shell cost?

A 14×25 hunting cabin shell from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 hunting cabin shell price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hunting cabin shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 hunting cabin shell?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hunting cabin shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 hunting cabin shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 hunting cabin shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 hunting cabin shell without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 hunting cabin shell.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 hunting cabin shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 hunting cabin shell in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 14×25 hunting cabin shell for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hunting cabin shell to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Hunting Cabin Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal building kit cabin with porch and American flag overlooking a mountain sunrise

14×25 Hunting Cabin Shell

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building kit gym with folding glass doors open to dumbbell rack and bench

14×25 Backyard Gym

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Backyard Gym | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Backyard Gym
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Backyard Gym

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Backyard Gym, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 14×25 backyard gym fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Garage-gym builders pick the 14×25 when a 14×25 shed feels cramped under a power rack.

You’re viewing:Backyard Gym·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Leg Height
  • Double-Bubble Insulation
  • Roll-Up Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-BACKYARD-GYMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 backyard gym.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 14×25 backyard gym fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑14′ × 25′ · 350 ground + loft

Backyard Gym layout.

Our 14×25 backyard gym fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Garage-gym builders pick the 14×25 when a 14×25 shed feels cramped under a power rack. 12-foot leg height clears overhead barbell presses and pull-up bars, and the 24-foot length splits cleanly into a lifting half and a cardio half without bumping equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Gym works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Backyard Gym in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Gym.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Gym spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Gym.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard gym
Everyday backyard gym
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard gym.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard gym + seasonal storage
backyard gym + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Backyard Gym, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 backyard gym is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Gym shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Backyard Gym buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Backyard Gym

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Gym · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Gym also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Gym questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 backyard gym cost?

A 14×25 backyard gym from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 backyard gym price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard gym ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 backyard gym?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard gym different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 backyard gym need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 backyard gym delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 backyard gym without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 backyard gym.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 backyard gym?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 backyard gym in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 14×25 backyard gym for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a backyard gym to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Gym quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building kit gym with folding glass doors open to dumbbell rack and bench

14×25 Backyard Gym

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Metal shed interior with lawn mowers, ladders, shelving bins and organized tool storage

14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Motorcycle & Toy Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Our 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Riders with 2-3 motorcycles, a side-by-side, or jet skis pick the 14×25.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle & Toy Garage·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • 8×8 Roll-Up Door
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-MOTORCYCLE-TOY-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft

Motorcycle & Toy Garage layout.

Our 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Riders with 2-3 motorcycles, a side-by-side, or jet skis pick the 14×25 over a tight single-car garage because it parks the toys side-by-side with room for a maintenance bench. The 14×25 roll-up door fits a UTV with windshield up, and the longer footprint lets you walk around each machine.

💡 Pro tip:Motorcycle & Toy Garage works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle & Toy Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle & Toy Garage spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle & Toy Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle & toy garage
Everyday motorcycle & toy garage
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle & toy garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle & toy garage + seasonal storage
motorcycle & toy garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle & Toy Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle & Toy Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle & Toy Garage also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle & Toy Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage cost?

A 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle & toy garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle & toy garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 motorcycle & toy garage typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle & Toy Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal shed interior with lawn mowers, ladders, shelving bins and organized tool storage

14×25 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building kit she shed with white French doors, string lights, and paver patio

14×25 She-Shed Garden Building

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 She-Shed Garden Building | Steel and Stud, From $5,800

12

14×25 She-Shed Garden Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,600$5,800SAVE $800
or $121/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25She-Shed Garden Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 She-Shed Garden Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

14×25 delivers 350 sq ft of rugged she-shed garden building space. Gardeners build out a 14×25 utility shed as a potting station, seed-starting greenhouse, and tool wall combined. Wainscoting on the lower 3 feet hides.

You’re viewing:She-Shed Garden Building·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,800$6,600Save $800
or as low as $121/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$5,600
14×25
this size
$5,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • Skylight Ready
  • Wainscoting
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-SHE-SHED-GARDEN-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 she-shed garden building.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. 14×25 delivers 350 sq ft of rugged she-shed garden building space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑14′ × 25′ · 350 ground + loft

She-Shed Garden Building layout.

14×25 delivers 350 sq ft of rugged she-shed garden building space. Gardeners build out a 14×25 utility shed as a potting station, seed-starting greenhouse, and tool wall combined. Wainscoting on the lower 3 feet hides dirt and mud splatter, and skylight upgrades on a Boxed Eave roof flood the workbench with daylight without adding wall windows.

💡 Pro tip:She-Shed Garden Building works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 She-Shed Garden Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your She-Shed Garden Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

She-Shed Garden Building spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use She-Shed Garden Building.

DAILY USEEveryday she-shed garden building
Everyday she-shed garden building
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a she-shed garden building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshe-shed garden building + seasonal storage
she-shed garden building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 She-Shed Garden Building, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$121/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 she-shed garden building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $121/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from She-Shed Garden Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 She-Shed Garden Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 She-Shed Garden Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your She-Shed Garden Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose She-Shed Garden Building also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

She-Shed Garden Building questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 she-shed garden building cost?

A 14×25 she-shed garden building from Steel and Stud starts at $5,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $121/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 she-shed garden building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud she-shed garden building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 she-shed garden building?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud she-shed garden building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 she-shed garden building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 she-shed garden building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 she-shed garden building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $121/month on a 14×25 she-shed garden building.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 she-shed garden building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 she-shed garden building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 14×25 she-shed garden building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your She-Shed Garden Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building kit she shed with white French doors, string lights, and paver patio

14×25 She-Shed Garden Building

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building with full glass storefront fronting a paved parking lot

14×25 Small Business Shop

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Small Business Shop | Steel and Stud, From $7,000

12

14×25 Small Business Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,000$7,000SAVE $1,000
or $146/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Small Business Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Small Business Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 14×25 small business shop packs 350 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Solo trades, mobile mechanics, small-engine repair, mobile detailers, use a.

You’re viewing:Small Business Shop·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,000$8,000Save $1,000
or as low as $146/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$6,800
14×25
this size
$7,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • IBC Certified
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Walk-In + Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-SMALL-BUSINESS-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 small business shop.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 14×25 small business shop packs 350 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft

Small Business Shop layout.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 14×25 small business shop packs 350 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Solo trades, mobile mechanics, small-engine repair, mobile detailers, use a 14×25 metal building as a permitted commercial shop on residential or commercial-light parcels. The footprint stays under most county commercial-occupancy thresholds while still fitting a customer vehicle plus tool storage.

💡 Pro tip:Small Business Shop works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Small Business Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Business Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Business Shop spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Business Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday small business shop
Everyday small business shop
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall business shop + seasonal storage
small business shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Small Business Shop, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$146/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 small business shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $146/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Business Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Small Business Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Small Business Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Business Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Business Shop also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Business Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 small business shop cost?

A 14×25 small business shop from Steel and Stud starts at $7,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $146/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 small business shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud small business shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 small business shop?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small business shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 small business shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 small business shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 small business shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $146/month on a 14×25 small business shop.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 small business shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 small business shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 14×25 small business shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Business Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building with full glass storefront fronting a paved parking lot

14×25 Small Business Shop

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green steel structure run-in shelter with timber framing beside a country pond

14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Drive-Through Equipment Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay, built for daily backyard use.

14×25 delivers 350 sq ft of everyday drive-through equipment bay space. Property owners with multiple machines spec a drive-through layout, two roll-up doors mounted on opposite 24-foot sidewalls let you pull an ATV.

You’re viewing:Drive-Through Equipment Bay·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • Drive-Thru Layout
  • Dual Sidewall Roll-Ups
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-DRIVE-THROUGH-EQBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 drive-through equipment bay.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. 14×25 delivers 350 sq ft of everyday drive-through equipment bay space.

TruckTrailer14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft pass-through

Drive-Through Equipment Bay layout.

14×25 delivers 350 sq ft of everyday drive-through equipment bay space. Property owners with multiple machines spec a drive-through layout, two roll-up doors mounted on opposite 24-foot sidewalls let you pull an ATV, mower, or trailer straight in one side and out the other without backing or three-point turns. The pull-through bay layout doubles as a wash-down zone in summer and a covered hitching area in winter, and the open run-through means no tight 90-degree corners around a single-door pivot point.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Equipment Bay works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Drive-Through Equipment Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Drive-Through Equipment Bay spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Drive-Through Equipment Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday drive-through equipment bay
Everyday drive-through equipment bay
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a drive-through equipment bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdrive-through equipment bay + seasonal storage
drive-through equipment bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 drive-through equipment bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Drive-Through Equipment Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Drive-Through Equipment Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Drive-Through Equipment Bay also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Drive-Through Equipment Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 drive-through equipment bay cost?

A 14×25 drive-through equipment bay from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 drive-through equipment bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud drive-through equipment bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 drive-through equipment bay?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud drive-through equipment bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 drive-through equipment bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 drive-through equipment bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 drive-through equipment bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 drive-through equipment bay.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 drive-through equipment bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 drive-through equipment bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 drive-through equipment bay add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 drive-through equipment bay typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Drive-Through Equipment Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green steel structure run-in shelter with timber framing beside a country pond

14×25 Drive-Through Equipment Bay

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray metal workshop with black roll-up door and stone landscaping on a wooded lot

14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop), built for daily backyard use.

14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop) space. Homeowners pick this layout when a standard 14×30 garage feels cramped. The extra 10 feet behind the vehicle holds a workbench, rolling tool.

You’re viewing:Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-METAL-GARAGE-ONEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop).

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. 14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop) space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) layout.

14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop) space. Homeowners pick this layout when a standard 14×30 garage feels cramped. The extra 10 feet behind the vehicle holds a workbench, rolling tool chest, and pegboard wall. A full-size F-150 (19’6") fits with 10+ feet of clear bench space behind the bumper.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop).

DAILY USEEveryday metal garage (one-car + workshop)
Everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop)
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal garage (one-car + workshop).
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal garage (one-car + workshop) + seasonal storage
metal garage (one-car + workshop) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop), what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) cost?

A 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal garage (one-car + workshop) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop)?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal garage (one-car + workshop) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop).

What warranty comes with the 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) typically adds $3,360–$5,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray metal workshop with black roll-up door and stone landscaping on a wooded lot

14×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal carport with blue roof and attached garage sheltering a pickup by mountains

14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Carport for Truck + Trailer

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Open-side carport configuration covers a crew-cab pickup with a bumper-pull utility.

You’re viewing:Carport for Truck + Trailer·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • 140 MPH Rated
  • Open Sides
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-CARPORT-TRUCK-TRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 carport for truck + trailer.

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. Looking for a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft

Carport for Truck + Trailer layout.

Looking for a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Open-side carport configuration covers a crew-cab pickup with a bumper-pull utility trailer hitched, end to end. Small property owners use this when a 14×30 carport leaves the trailer tongue exposed. Vertical roof sheds rain off both sides without gutter overflow.

💡 Pro tip:Carport for Truck + Trailer works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport for Truck + Trailer.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport for Truck + Trailer spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport for Truck + Trailer.

DAILY USEEveryday carport for truck + trailer
Everyday carport for truck + trailer
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport for truck + trailer.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport for truck + trailer + seasonal storage
carport for truck + trailer + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer, what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 carport for truck + trailer is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport for Truck + Trailer shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport for Truck + Trailer · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport for Truck + Trailer also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport for Truck + Trailer questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer cost?

A 14×30 carport for truck + trailer from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 carport for truck + trailer price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport for truck + trailer ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport for truck + trailer different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer.

What warranty comes with the 14×30 carport for truck + trailer?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 carport for truck + trailer in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×30 carport for truck + trailer add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×30 carport for truck + trailer typically adds $3,360–$5,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Carport for Truck + Trailer quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal carport with blue roof and attached garage sheltering a pickup by mountains

14×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal shed with single-slope roof and open bay framed in wood beside a pond

14×30 Storage Building (Backyard)

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Storage Building (Backyard) | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

14×30 Storage Building (Backyard)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Storage Building (Backyard)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Storage Building (Backyard), built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 14×30 storage building (backyard)? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Fully enclosed storage shed for homeowners with too much gear and no basement.

You’re viewing:Storage Building (Backyard)·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • 29 GA Panels
  • Walk-In Door
  • R-13 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 storage building (backyard).

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. Looking for a 14×30 storage building (backyard)? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft shop

Storage Building (Backyard) layout.

Looking for a 14×30 storage building (backyard)? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Fully enclosed storage shed for homeowners with too much gear and no basement. Holds two riding mowers, a snowblower, kayaks on a wall rack, and seasonal bins on shelving. Single 14×30 roll-up plus a 36" walk-in door makes daily access easy.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Building (Backyard) works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Storage Building (Backyard) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Building (Backyard).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Building (Backyard) spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Building (Backyard).

DAILY USEEveryday storage building (backyard)
Everyday storage building (backyard)
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building (backyard).
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage building (backyard) + seasonal storage
storage building (backyard) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Storage Building (Backyard), what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 storage building (backyard) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Building (Backyard) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Storage Building (Backyard) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Storage Building (Backyard)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Building (Backyard) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Building (Backyard) also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Building (Backyard) questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 storage building (backyard) cost?

A 14×30 storage building (backyard) from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 storage building (backyard) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage building (backyard) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 storage building (backyard)?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage building (backyard) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 storage building (backyard) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 storage building (backyard) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 storage building (backyard) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 14×30 storage building (backyard).

What warranty comes with the 14×30 storage building (backyard)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 storage building (backyard) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×30 storage building (backyard) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×30 storage building (backyard) typically adds $3,360–$5,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Building (Backyard) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal shed with single-slope roof and open bay framed in wood beside a pond

14×30 Storage Building (Backyard)

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel building garden studio at golden hour with french doors, window box, and wooden bench

14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover, built for daily backyard use.

14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of everyday lawn & garden equipment cover space. Zero-turn mower parked next to a push mower, with string trimmers on wall hooks and a potting bench against the gable, all fit inside this layout.

You’re viewing:Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Vertical Roof
  • Galvalume Trim
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-LAWN-GARDEN-EQUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover.

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. 14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of everyday lawn & garden equipment cover space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft shop

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover layout.

14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of everyday lawn & garden equipment cover space. Zero-turn mower parked next to a push mower, with string trimmers on wall hooks and a potting bench against the gable, all fit inside this layout with walking room left over. Gardeners running a small property use the long 30-foot wall for double sliding barn doors so a sub-compact tractor can drive straight in. Galvalume trim shrugs off fertilizer and irrigation overspray.

💡 Pro tip:Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday lawn & garden equipment cover
Everyday lawn & garden equipment cover
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a lawn & garden equipment cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlawn & garden equipment cover + seasonal storage
lawn & garden equipment cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover, what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover cost?

A 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud lawn & garden equipment cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud lawn & garden equipment cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover.

What warranty comes with the 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover typically adds $3,360–$5,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel building garden studio at golden hour with french doors, window box, and wooden bench

14×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building studio with black double doors and ornamental grass landscaping

14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Workshop / Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 14×30 workshop / hobby room? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists building a woodshop, leather studio, or model railroad layout use the 14×30.

You’re viewing:Workshop / Hobby Room·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 2 Windows Std
  • Insulated Walk-In
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 workshop / hobby room.

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. Looking for a 14×30 workshop / hobby room? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft

Workshop / Hobby Room layout.

Looking for a 14×30 workshop / hobby room? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists building a woodshop, leather studio, or model railroad layout use the 14×30 enclosed for a dedicated 420 sq ft workspace. Insulated walls plus a mini-split keep it usable year-round. Two 14×30 windows on the long wall pull in natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Workshop / Hobby Room works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop / hobby room
Everyday workshop / hobby room
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop / hobby room + seasonal storage
workshop / hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room, what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 workshop / hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop / Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop / Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 workshop / hobby room cost?

A 14×30 workshop / hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 workshop / hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop / hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 workshop / hobby room?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 workshop / hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 workshop / hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 workshop / hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 14×30 workshop / hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 14×30 workshop / hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 workshop / hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×30 workshop / hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×30 workshop / hobby room typically adds $3,360–$5,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building studio with black double doors and ornamental grass landscaping

14×30 Workshop / Hobby Room

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cozy craft studio inside a metal building with sewing table, yarn shelves, and floral armchair

14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Home Office / Backyard Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 14×30 home office / backyard studio? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready.

You’re viewing:Home Office / Backyard Studio·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Package
  • HOA-Friendly Colors
  • French Door Option
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-HOME-OFFICE-BACKBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 home office / backyard studio.

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. Looking for a 14×30 home office / backyard studio? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft

Home Office / Backyard Studio layout.

Looking for a 14×30 home office / backyard studio? At 420 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready interior, and a 36" entry door. 420 sq ft fits a desk zone, lounge corner, and a small kitchenette wall. Add wainscoting and Pewter Gray walls for residential curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office / Backyard Studio works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office / Backyard Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office / Backyard Studio spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office / Backyard Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home office / backyard studio
Everyday home office / backyard studio
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office / backyard studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office / backyard studio + seasonal storage
home office / backyard studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio, what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 home office / backyard studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office / Backyard Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office / Backyard Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office / Backyard Studio also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office / Backyard Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 home office / backyard studio cost?

A 14×30 home office / backyard studio from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 home office / backyard studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office / backyard studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 home office / backyard studio?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office / backyard studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 home office / backyard studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 home office / backyard studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 home office / backyard studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 14×30 home office / backyard studio.

What warranty comes with the 14×30 home office / backyard studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 home office / backyard studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×30 home office / backyard studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×30 home office / backyard studio typically adds $3,360–$5,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office / Backyard Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cozy craft studio inside a metal building with sewing table, yarn shelves, and floral armchair

14×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal barn with red roof, pickup truck, and flatbed trailer hauling hay bales

14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover | Steel and Stud, From $6,850

12

14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,800$6,850SAVE $950
or $143/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Hay & Feed Storage Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover, built for farm and ranch demands.

14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage cover space. Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 14×30 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain. Three-side enclosure with the long side.

You’re viewing:Hay & Feed Storage Cover·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,850$7,800Save $950
or as low as $143/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • 3-Side Enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • 65 PSF Snow
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-HAY-FEED-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 hay & feed storage cover.

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. 14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage cover space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft

Hay & Feed Storage Cover layout.

14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage cover space. Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 14×30 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain. Three-side enclosure with the long side open lets you back a flatbed straight up. Vertical roof prevents water pooling on long runs.

💡 Pro tip:Hay & Feed Storage Cover works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Feed Storage Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Feed Storage Cover spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Feed Storage Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday hay & feed storage cover
Everyday hay & feed storage cover
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & feed storage cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay & feed storage cover + seasonal storage
hay & feed storage cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover, what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$143/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 hay & feed storage cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $143/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Feed Storage Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay & Feed Storage Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay & Feed Storage Cover also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay & Feed Storage Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 hay & feed storage cover cost?

A 14×30 hay & feed storage cover from Steel and Stud starts at $6,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $143/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 hay & feed storage cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & feed storage cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 hay & feed storage cover?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay & feed storage cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 hay & feed storage cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 hay & feed storage cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 hay & feed storage cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $143/month on a 14×30 hay & feed storage cover.

What warranty comes with the 14×30 hay & feed storage cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 hay & feed storage cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 14×30 hay & feed storage cover stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Feed Storage Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal barn with red roof, pickup truck, and flatbed trailer hauling hay bales

14×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Hip roof prefab metal building in warm wood brown with glass panels and exercise bike

14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage packs 420 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Two side-by-sides parked nose-to-tail, or a UTV plus 2 ATVs plus a gear wall, all.

You’re viewing:ATV & Side-by-Side Garage·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Mud-Friendly Galvalume
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-ATV-SIDE-BY-SIDEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage.

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage packs 420 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage layout.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage packs 420 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Two side-by-sides parked nose-to-tail, or a UTV plus 2 ATVs plus a gear wall, all inside 420 sq ft. Roll-up door on the gable end lets you ride in and out without dismounting. Common spec for hunting cabins and rural hobbyists.

💡 Pro tip:ATV & Side-by-Side Garage works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV & Side-by-Side Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv & side-by-side garage
Everyday atv & side-by-side garage
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv & side-by-side garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv & side-by-side garage + seasonal storage
atv & side-by-side garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage, what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV & Side-by-Side Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV & Side-by-Side Garage also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage cost?

A 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv & side-by-side garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv & side-by-side garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage.

What warranty comes with the 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 14×30 atv & side-by-side garage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a atv & side-by-side garage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Hip roof prefab metal building in warm wood brown with glass panels and exercise bike

14×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Metal garage man cave interior with sports car, pool table, TV lounge, and wood beams

14×30 Pool House / Cabana

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Pool House / Cabana | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

14×30 Pool House / Cabana
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Pool House / Cabana

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Pool House / Cabana, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 14×30 pool house / cabana packs 420 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with an in-ground pool use the 14×30 as a pool house with a covered changing room.

You’re viewing:Pool House / Cabana·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,200
16×30
wider
$7,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • Partial Enclosure
  • Custom Color Match
  • French Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-POOL-HOUSE-CABANBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 pool house / cabana.

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 14×30 pool house / cabana packs 420 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft ADU

Pool House / Cabana layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 14×30 pool house / cabana packs 420 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with an in-ground pool use the 14×30 as a pool house with a covered changing room, equipment storage, and a shaded lounge zone. Split it 14×30 enclosed plus a 14×30 open-side cover, same building, two functions.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House / Cabana works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Pool House / Cabana in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House / Cabana.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House / Cabana spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House / Cabana.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house / cabana
Everyday pool house / cabana
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house / cabana.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house / cabana + seasonal storage
pool house / cabana + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Pool House / Cabana, what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 pool house / cabana is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House / Cabana shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Pool House / Cabana buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Pool House / Cabana

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House / Cabana · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House / Cabana also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House / Cabana questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 pool house / cabana cost?

A 14×30 pool house / cabana from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 pool house / cabana price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house / cabana ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 pool house / cabana?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house / cabana different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 pool house / cabana need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 pool house / cabana delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 pool house / cabana without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 14×30 pool house / cabana.

What warranty comes with the 14×30 pool house / cabana?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 pool house / cabana in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×30 pool house / cabana add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×30 pool house / cabana typically adds $3,360–$5,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House / Cabana quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal garage man cave interior with sports car, pool table, TV lounge, and wood beams

14×30 Pool House / Cabana

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel building for equipment storage with mini excavator and skid steers at the open bay

14×30 Tool Shed for Contractors

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Tool Shed for Contractors | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

14×30 Tool Shed for Contractors
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Tool Shed for Contractors

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Tool Shed for Contractors, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 14×30 tool shed for contractors packs 420 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Self-employed trades use this as a locked tool shed at home: ladders, pipe stock.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed for Contractors·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Deadbolt + Wi-Fi
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-TOOL-SHED-CONTRABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 tool shed for contractors.

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 14×30 tool shed for contractors packs 420 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft

Tool Shed for Contractors layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 14×30 tool shed for contractors packs 420 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Self-employed trades use this as a locked tool shed at home: ladders, pipe stock, compressor, miter saw station, and stacked totes. The 14×30 roll-up swallows a full sheet of plywood flat. Slide bolt plus deadbolt plus Wi-Fi opener keeps it secure overnight.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed for Contractors works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Tool Shed for Contractors in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed for Contractors.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed for Contractors spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed for Contractors.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed for contractors
Everyday tool shed for contractors
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed for contractors.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed for contractors + seasonal storage
tool shed for contractors + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Tool Shed for Contractors, what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 tool shed for contractors is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed for Contractors shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Tool Shed for Contractors buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Tool Shed for Contractors

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed for Contractors · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed for Contractors also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🌾 14×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

14×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed for Contractors questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 tool shed for contractors cost?

A 14×30 tool shed for contractors from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 tool shed for contractors price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed for contractors ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 tool shed for contractors?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed for contractors different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 tool shed for contractors need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 tool shed for contractors delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 tool shed for contractors without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 14×30 tool shed for contractors.

What warranty comes with the 14×30 tool shed for contractors?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 tool shed for contractors in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×30 tool shed for contractors add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×30 tool shed for contractors typically adds $3,360–$5,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed for Contractors quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel building for equipment storage with mini excavator and skid steers at the open bay

14×30 Tool Shed for Contractors

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sand colored steel structure with green trim and open front bays near a lake

14×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To | Steel and Stud, From $6,850

12

14×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,800$6,850SAVE $950
or $143/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×30Tractor & Implement Lean-To

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To, built for farm and ranch demands.

14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of rugged tractor & implement lean-to space. Open gable ends let you drive straight through.

You’re viewing:Tractor & Implement Lean-To·Size14×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,850$7,800Save $950
or as low as $143/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×30
14×30
this size
$6,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 420 sq ft enclosed
  • Lean-To Config
  • Attaches To Existing
  • Open Gables
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X30-TRACTOR-IMPLEMENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×30 tractor & implement lean-to.

14 feet wide × 30 feet long. 14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of rugged tractor & implement lean-to space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack14′ × 30′ · 420 sq ft shop

Tractor & Implement Lean-To layout.

14×30 delivers 420 sq ft of rugged tractor & implement lean-to space. Open gable ends let you drive straight through.

💡 Pro tip:Tractor & Implement Lean-To works well at 14×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor & Implement Lean-To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
420 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor & Implement Lean-To spec sheet.

Width14′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space420 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor & Implement Lean-To.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor & implement lean-to
Everyday tractor & implement lean-to
420 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor & implement lean-to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor & implement lean-to + seasonal storage
tractor & implement lean-to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To, what makes it different.

420sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$143/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×30 tractor & implement lean-to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $143/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×30?

420 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 30′ footprint with 420 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,360–$5,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor & Implement Lean-To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tractor & Implement Lean-To · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,890+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor & Implement Lean-To also viewed:

🏡 14×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

14×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 14×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

14×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 14×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

14×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 14×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

14×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 14×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

14×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 14×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

14×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 14×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

14×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 14×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

14×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 14×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

14×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 14×30

Pool House / Cabana

14×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 14×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

14×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor & Implement Lean-To questions, answered.

How much does a 14×30 tractor & implement lean-to cost?

A 14×30 tractor & implement lean-to from Steel and Stud starts at $6,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $143/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×30 tractor & implement lean-to price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor & implement lean-to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×30 tractor & implement lean-to?

Almost always for 420+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor & implement lean-to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×30 tractor & implement lean-to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×30 tractor & implement lean-to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×30 tractor & implement lean-to without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $143/month on a 14×30 tractor & implement lean-to.

What warranty comes with the 14×30 tractor & implement lean-to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×30 tractor & implement lean-to in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 14×30 tractor & implement lean-to stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor & Implement Lean-To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sand colored steel structure with green trim and open front bays near a lake

14×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

420 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

14′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×30 steel building delivers 420 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Long tan metal building with black roof, roll-up door and windows beside pasture fencing

15×25 Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×25 Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,550

12

15×25 Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,350$5,550SAVE $800
or $116/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×25Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×25 Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage, built for daily backyard use.

15×25 delivers 375 sq ft of everyday compact garage / small suv garage space. Add an 8’x7 , 9’x8 , or 10’x8 roll-up door and a 32 or 36 walk-in to keep daily access and weekend projects organized.

You’re viewing:Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage·Size15×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,550$6,350Save $800
or as low as $116/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×25
15×25
this size
$5,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 375 sq ft enclosed
  • From $4,995
  • Vertical Roof
  • 14 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X25-COMPACT-GARAGE-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×25 compact garage / small suv garage.

15 feet wide × 25 feet long. 15×25 delivers 375 sq ft of everyday compact garage / small suv garage space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area15′ × 25′ · 375 sq ft

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage layout.

15×25 delivers 375 sq ft of everyday compact garage / small suv garage space. Add an 8’x7 , 9’x8 , or 10’x8 roll-up door and a 32 or 36 walk-in to keep daily access and weekend projects organized.

💡 Pro tip:Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage works well at 15×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×25 Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
375 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage spec sheet.

Width15′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space375 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday compact garage / small suv garage
Everyday compact garage / small suv garage
375 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a compact garage / small suv garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcompact garage / small suv garage + seasonal storage
compact garage / small suv garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×25 Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage, what makes it different.

375sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$116/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×25 compact garage / small suv garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $116/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×25?

375 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 25′ footprint with 375 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,000–$4,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×25 Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×25 Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,688+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage also viewed:

🏡 15×25

Backyard Workshop

15×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×25

Single Carport

15×25 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×25

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×25 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×25

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×25 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×25

Hobby Studio

15×25 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×25

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×25

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×25 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×25

Pump House / Well Shed

15×25 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×25

Bike & Gear Storage

15×25 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×25

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×25 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×25

Backyard Office / Studio

15×25 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 15×25 compact garage / small suv garage cost?

A 15×25 compact garage / small suv garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $116/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×25 compact garage / small suv garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud compact garage / small suv garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×25 compact garage / small suv garage?

Almost always for 375+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud compact garage / small suv garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×25 compact garage / small suv garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×25 compact garage / small suv garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×25 compact garage / small suv garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $116/month on a 15×25 compact garage / small suv garage.

What warranty comes with the 15×25 compact garage / small suv garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×25 compact garage / small suv garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 15×25 compact garage / small suv garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 15×25 compact garage / small suv garage typically adds $3,000–$4,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Long tan metal building with black roof, roll-up door and windows beside pasture fencing

15×25 Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with brown roll-up door and white entry in autumn woods

15×25 Backyard Workshop

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×25 Backyard Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $5,550

12

15×25 Backyard Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,350$5,550SAVE $800
or $116/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×25Backyard Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×25 Backyard Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 15×25 backyard workshop packs 375 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. A 375 sq ft hobby shop fits a workbench, pegboard wall, tool chest, small table saw or miter.

You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop·Size15×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,550$6,350Save $800
or as low as $116/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×25
15×25
this size
$5,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 375 sq ft enclosed
  • From $5,495
  • Wired Ready
  • 14 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X25-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×25 backyard workshop.

15 feet wide × 25 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 15×25 backyard workshop packs 375 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP15′ × 25′ · 375 sq ft

Backyard Workshop layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 15×25 backyard workshop packs 375 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. A 375 sq ft hobby shop fits a workbench, pegboard wall, tool chest, small table saw or miter station, and deeper storage along one wall. Insulation-ready frame keeps the space comfortable for evening woodworking or tinkering year-round.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Workshop works well at 15×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×25 Backyard Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
375 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Workshop spec sheet.

Width15′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space375 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard workshop
Everyday backyard workshop
375 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard workshop + seasonal storage
backyard workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×25 Backyard Workshop, what makes it different.

375sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$116/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×25 backyard workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $116/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×25?

375 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 25′ footprint with 375 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,000–$4,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×25 Backyard Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×25 Backyard Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,688+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Workshop also viewed:

🏡 15×25

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×25 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×25

Single Carport

15×25 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×25

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×25 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×25

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×25 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×25

Hobby Studio

15×25 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×25

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×25

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×25 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×25

Pump House / Well Shed

15×25 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×25

Bike & Gear Storage

15×25 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×25

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×25 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×25

Backyard Office / Studio

15×25 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 15×25 backyard workshop cost?

A 15×25 backyard workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $5,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $116/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×25 backyard workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×25 backyard workshop?

Almost always for 375+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×25 backyard workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×25 backyard workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×25 backyard workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $116/month on a 15×25 backyard workshop.

What warranty comes with the 15×25 backyard workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×25 backyard workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 15×25 backyard workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 15×25 backyard workshop typically adds $3,000–$4,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with brown roll-up door and white entry in autumn woods

15×25 Backyard Workshop

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel building with dark trim, lean to covered patio, and string lights at dusk

15×25 Single Carport

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×25 Single Carport | Steel and Stud, From $5,550

12

15×25 Single Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,350$5,550SAVE $800
or $116/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×25Single Carport

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×25 Single Carport, built for daily backyard use.

Our 15×25 single carport fits 15-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Cheapest 15×25 configuration. Cover one compact car, small SUV, motorcycle, ATV.

You’re viewing:Single Carport·Size15×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,550$6,350Save $800
or as low as $116/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×25
15×25
this size
$5,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 375 sq ft enclosed
  • From $3,295
  • 3 Roof Styles
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X25-SINGLE-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×25 single carport.

15 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 15×25 single carport fits 15-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area15′ × 25′ · 375 sq ft

Single Carport layout.

Our 15×25 single carport fits 15-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Cheapest 15×25 configuration. Cover one compact car, small SUV, motorcycle, ATV, zero-turn mower, or garden tractor under tubular steel. Side panels can be added later if you decide to enclose for storage.

💡 Pro tip:Single Carport works well at 15×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×25 Single Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
375 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single Carport spec sheet.

Width15′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space375 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday single carport
Everyday single carport
375 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle carport + seasonal storage
single carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×25 Single Carport, what makes it different.

375sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$116/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×25 single carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $116/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×25?

375 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 25′ footprint with 375 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,000–$4,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×25 Single Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×25 Single Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,688+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single Carport also viewed:

🏡 15×25

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×25 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×25

Backyard Workshop

15×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×25

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×25 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×25

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×25 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×25

Hobby Studio

15×25 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×25

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×25

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×25 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×25

Pump House / Well Shed

15×25 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×25

Bike & Gear Storage

15×25 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×25

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×25 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×25

Backyard Office / Studio

15×25 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 15×25 single carport cost?

A 15×25 single carport from Steel and Stud starts at $5,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $116/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×25 single carport price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×25 single carport?

Almost always for 375+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×25 single carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×25 single carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×25 single carport without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $116/month on a 15×25 single carport.

What warranty comes with the 15×25 single carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×25 single carport in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 15×25 single carport add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 15×25 single carport typically adds $3,000–$4,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel building with dark trim, lean to covered patio, and string lights at dusk

15×25 Single Carport

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sage green metal shed with glass-paned door, window flower boxes and cottage garden

15×25 Tool Shed / Garden Storage

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×25 Tool Shed / Garden Storage | Steel and Stud, From $5,550

12

15×25 Tool Shed / Garden Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,350$5,550SAVE $800
or $116/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×25Tool Shed / Garden Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×25 Tool Shed / Garden Storage, built for daily backyard use.

15×25 delivers 375 sq ft of everyday tool shed / garden storage space. Lockable steel storage for shovels, rakes, mowers, ladders, leaf blowers, bins, and pool chemicals. Replaces a rotting wood shed with a structure.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed / Garden Storage·Size15×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,550$6,350Save $800
or as low as $116/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×25
15×25
this size
$5,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 375 sq ft enclosed
  • From $4,495
  • Lockable
  • Pre-Painted
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X25-TOOL-SHED-GARDENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×25 tool shed / garden storage.

15 feet wide × 25 feet long. 15×25 delivers 375 sq ft of everyday tool shed / garden storage space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP15′ × 25′ · 375 sq ft

Tool Shed / Garden Storage layout.

15×25 delivers 375 sq ft of everyday tool shed / garden storage space. Lockable steel storage for shovels, rakes, mowers, ladders, leaf blowers, bins, and pool chemicals. Replaces a rotting wood shed with a structure that survives 20+ winters of weather.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed / Garden Storage works well at 15×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×25 Tool Shed / Garden Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed / Garden Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
375 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed / Garden Storage spec sheet.

Width15′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space375 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed / Garden Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed / garden storage
Everyday tool shed / garden storage
375 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed / garden storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed / garden storage + seasonal storage
tool shed / garden storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×25 Tool Shed / Garden Storage, what makes it different.

375sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$116/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×25 tool shed / garden storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $116/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×25?

375 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 25′ footprint with 375 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,000–$4,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed / Garden Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×25 Tool Shed / Garden Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×25 Tool Shed / Garden Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed / Garden Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,688+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed / Garden Storage also viewed:

🏡 15×25

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×25 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×25

Backyard Workshop

15×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×25

Single Carport

15×25 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×25

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×25 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×25

Hobby Studio

15×25 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×25

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×25

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×25 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×25

Pump House / Well Shed

15×25 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×25

Bike & Gear Storage

15×25 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×25

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×25 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×25

Backyard Office / Studio

15×25 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed / Garden Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 15×25 tool shed / garden storage cost?

A 15×25 tool shed / garden storage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $116/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×25 tool shed / garden storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed / garden storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×25 tool shed / garden storage?

Almost always for 375+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed / garden storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×25 tool shed / garden storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×25 tool shed / garden storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×25 tool shed / garden storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $116/month on a 15×25 tool shed / garden storage.

What warranty comes with the 15×25 tool shed / garden storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×25 tool shed / garden storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 15×25 tool shed / garden storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 15×25 tool shed / garden storage typically adds $3,000–$4,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed / Garden Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green metal shed with glass-paned door, window flower boxes and cottage garden

15×25 Tool Shed / Garden Storage

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel garage at dusk with black roll-up door as a rider walks his Harley

15×25 Lawn Equipment Shelter

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×25 Lawn Equipment Shelter | Steel and Stud, From $5,550

12

15×25 Lawn Equipment Shelter
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,350$5,550SAVE $800
or $116/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×25Lawn Equipment Shelter

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×25 Lawn Equipment Shelter, built for daily backyard use.

Our 15×25 lawn equipment shelter fits 15-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Open-side shelter for a riding mower, garden tractor, push mower.

You’re viewing:Lawn Equipment Shelter·Size15×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,550$6,350Save $800
or as low as $116/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×25
15×25
this size
$5,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 375 sq ft enclosed
  • From $3,295
  • Up to 8 Tall
  • Lawn Tractor Fit
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X25-LAWN-EQUIPMENT-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×25 lawn equipment shelter.

15 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 15×25 lawn equipment shelter fits 15-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack15′ × 25′ · 375 sq ft shop

Lawn Equipment Shelter layout.

Our 15×25 lawn equipment shelter fits 15-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Open-side shelter for a riding mower, garden tractor, push mower, snowblower, or ATV. Keeps UV and snow off engines and seats without the cost of full enclosure.

💡 Pro tip:Lawn Equipment Shelter works well at 15×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×25 Lawn Equipment Shelter in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Lawn Equipment Shelter.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
375 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Lawn Equipment Shelter spec sheet.

Width15′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space375 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Lawn Equipment Shelter.

DAILY USEEveryday lawn equipment shelter
Everyday lawn equipment shelter
375 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a lawn equipment shelter.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlawn equipment shelter + seasonal storage
lawn equipment shelter + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×25 Lawn Equipment Shelter, what makes it different.

375sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$116/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×25 lawn equipment shelter is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $116/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×25?

375 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 25′ footprint with 375 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,000–$4,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Lawn Equipment Shelter shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×25 Lawn Equipment Shelter buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×25 Lawn Equipment Shelter

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Lawn Equipment Shelter · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,688+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Lawn Equipment Shelter also viewed:

🏡 15×25

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×25 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×25

Backyard Workshop

15×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×25

Single Carport

15×25 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×25

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×25 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🎯 15×25

Hobby Studio

15×25 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×25

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×25

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×25 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×25

Pump House / Well Shed

15×25 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×25

Bike & Gear Storage

15×25 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×25

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×25 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×25

Backyard Office / Studio

15×25 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Lawn Equipment Shelter questions, answered.

How much does a 15×25 lawn equipment shelter cost?

A 15×25 lawn equipment shelter from Steel and Stud starts at $5,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $116/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×25 lawn equipment shelter price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud lawn equipment shelter ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×25 lawn equipment shelter?

Almost always for 375+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud lawn equipment shelter different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×25 lawn equipment shelter need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×25 lawn equipment shelter delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×25 lawn equipment shelter without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $116/month on a 15×25 lawn equipment shelter.

What warranty comes with the 15×25 lawn equipment shelter?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×25 lawn equipment shelter in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 15×25 lawn equipment shelter add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 15×25 lawn equipment shelter typically adds $3,000–$4,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Lawn Equipment Shelter quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel garage at dusk with black roll-up door as a rider walks his Harley

15×25 Lawn Equipment Shelter

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sage green commercial metal building with single slope roof and tall glass entry

15×25 Hobby Studio

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×25 Hobby Studio | Steel and Stud, From $5,550

12

15×25 Hobby Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,350$5,550SAVE $800
or $116/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×25Hobby Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×25 Hobby Studio, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 15×25 hobby studio? At 375 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. 375 sq ft of private space for a yoga corner, painting studio, podcast booth, sewing room, or.

You’re viewing:Hobby Studio·Size15×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,550$6,350Save $800
or as low as $116/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×25
15×25
this size
$5,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 375 sq ft enclosed
  • From $5,995
  • Insulated
  • Wired Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X25-HOBBY-STUDIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×25 hobby studio.

15 feet wide × 25 feet long. Looking for a 15×25 hobby studio? At 375 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑15′ × 25′ · 375 ground + loft

Hobby Studio layout.

Looking for a 15×25 hobby studio? At 375 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. 375 sq ft of private space for a yoga corner, painting studio, podcast booth, sewing room, or homework annex. Insulated walls and one or two 15×25 windows keep light and noise where you want them.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Studio works well at 15×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×25 Hobby Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
375 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Studio spec sheet.

Width15′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space375 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby studio
Everyday hobby studio
375 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby studio + seasonal storage
hobby studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×25 Hobby Studio, what makes it different.

375sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$116/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×25 hobby studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $116/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×25?

375 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 25′ footprint with 375 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,000–$4,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×25 Hobby Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×25 Hobby Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,688+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Studio also viewed:

🏡 15×25

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×25 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×25

Backyard Workshop

15×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×25

Single Carport

15×25 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×25

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×25 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×25

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×25 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🌾 15×25

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×25

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×25 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×25

Pump House / Well Shed

15×25 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×25

Bike & Gear Storage

15×25 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×25

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×25 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×25

Backyard Office / Studio

15×25 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 15×25 hobby studio cost?

A 15×25 hobby studio from Steel and Stud starts at $5,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $116/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×25 hobby studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×25 hobby studio?

Almost always for 375+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×25 hobby studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×25 hobby studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×25 hobby studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $116/month on a 15×25 hobby studio.

What warranty comes with the 15×25 hobby studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×25 hobby studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 15×25 hobby studio for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hobby studio to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green commercial metal building with single slope roof and tall glass entry

15×25 Hobby Studio

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Prefab steel barn in tan with dutch doors and run-in horse shelter beside fenced pasture

15×25 Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×25 Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter | Steel and Stud, From $6,200

12

15×25 Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,050$6,200SAVE $850
or $129/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×25Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×25 Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter, built for farm and ranch demands.

15×25 delivers 375 sq ft of rugged chicken coop / small animal shelter space. Compact agricultural shelter for poultry, goats, rabbits, or a single horse stall. Steel frame deters predators, galvanized panels resist rot.

You’re viewing:Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter·Size15×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,200$7,050Save $850
or as low as $129/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×25
15×25
this size
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 375 sq ft enclosed
  • From $4,495
  • Vented
  • Predator Tough
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X25-CHICKEN-COOP-SMABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter.

15 feet wide × 25 feet long. 15×25 delivers 375 sq ft of rugged chicken coop / small animal shelter space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP15′ × 25′ · 375 sq ft

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter layout.

15×25 delivers 375 sq ft of rugged chicken coop / small animal shelter space. Compact agricultural shelter for poultry, goats, rabbits, or a single horse stall. Steel frame deters predators, galvanized panels resist rot from manure and bedding much better than treated wood.

💡 Pro tip:Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter works well at 15×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×25 Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
375 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter spec sheet.

Width15′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space375 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter.

DAILY USEEveryday chicken coop / small animal shelter
Everyday chicken coop / small animal shelter
375 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a chicken coop / small animal shelter.
STORAGE OVERFLOWchicken coop / small animal shelter + seasonal storage
chicken coop / small animal shelter + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×25 Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter, what makes it different.

375sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$129/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $129/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×25?

375 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 25′ footprint with 375 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,000–$4,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×25 Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×25 Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,688+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter also viewed:

🏡 15×25

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×25 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×25

Backyard Workshop

15×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×25

Single Carport

15×25 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×25

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×25 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×25

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×25 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×25

Hobby Studio

15×25 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🎯 15×25

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×25 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×25

Pump House / Well Shed

15×25 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×25

Bike & Gear Storage

15×25 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×25

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×25 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×25

Backyard Office / Studio

15×25 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter questions, answered.

How much does a 15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter cost?

A 15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter from Steel and Stud starts at $6,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $129/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud chicken coop / small animal shelter ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter?

Almost always for 375+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud chicken coop / small animal shelter different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $129/month on a 15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter.

What warranty comes with the 15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Prefab steel barn in tan with dutch doors and run-in horse shelter beside fenced pasture

15×25 Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red metal building kit with monitor roof loft, covered porch, and white trim

15×25 She Shed / Backyard Retreat

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×25 She Shed / Backyard Retreat | Steel and Stud, From $5,550

12

15×25 She Shed / Backyard Retreat
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,350$5,550SAVE $800
or $116/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×25She Shed / Backyard Retreat

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×25 She Shed / Backyard Retreat, built for hobby and recreational use.

15×25 delivers 375 sq ft of hobby-ready she shed / backyard retreat space. Quiet backyard getaway for crafting, reading, sewing, or a private home-office annex with a walk-in door, one or two windows, and a 20-year.

You’re viewing:She Shed / Backyard Retreat·Size15×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,550$6,350Save $800
or as low as $116/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×25
15×25
this size
$5,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 375 sq ft enclosed
  • From $5,995
  • Insulated
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X25-SHE-SHED-BACKYARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×25 she shed / backyard retreat.

15 feet wide × 25 feet long. 15×25 delivers 375 sq ft of hobby-ready she shed / backyard retreat space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑15′ × 25′ · 375 ground + loft

She Shed / Backyard Retreat layout.

15×25 delivers 375 sq ft of hobby-ready she shed / backyard retreat space. Quiet backyard getaway for crafting, reading, sewing, or a private home-office annex with a walk-in door, one or two windows, and a 20-year warranted exterior.

💡 Pro tip:She Shed / Backyard Retreat works well at 15×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×25 She Shed / Backyard Retreat in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your She Shed / Backyard Retreat.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
375 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

She Shed / Backyard Retreat spec sheet.

Width15′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space375 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use She Shed / Backyard Retreat.

DAILY USEEveryday she shed / backyard retreat
Everyday she shed / backyard retreat
375 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a she shed / backyard retreat.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshe shed / backyard retreat + seasonal storage
she shed / backyard retreat + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×25 She Shed / Backyard Retreat, what makes it different.

375sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$116/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×25 she shed / backyard retreat is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $116/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×25?

375 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 25′ footprint with 375 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,000–$4,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from She Shed / Backyard Retreat shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×25 She Shed / Backyard Retreat buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×25 She Shed / Backyard Retreat

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your She Shed / Backyard Retreat · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,688+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose She Shed / Backyard Retreat also viewed:

🏡 15×25

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×25 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×25

Backyard Workshop

15×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×25

Single Carport

15×25 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×25

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×25 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×25

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×25 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×25

Hobby Studio

15×25 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×25

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🏡 15×25

Pump House / Well Shed

15×25 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×25

Bike & Gear Storage

15×25 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×25

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×25 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×25

Backyard Office / Studio

15×25 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

She Shed / Backyard Retreat questions, answered.

How much does a 15×25 she shed / backyard retreat cost?

A 15×25 she shed / backyard retreat from Steel and Stud starts at $5,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $116/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×25 she shed / backyard retreat price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud she shed / backyard retreat ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×25 she shed / backyard retreat?

Almost always for 375+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud she shed / backyard retreat different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×25 she shed / backyard retreat need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×25 she shed / backyard retreat delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×25 she shed / backyard retreat without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $116/month on a 15×25 she shed / backyard retreat.

What warranty comes with the 15×25 she shed / backyard retreat?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×25 she shed / backyard retreat in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 15×25 she shed / backyard retreat for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a she shed / backyard retreat to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your She Shed / Backyard Retreat quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red metal building kit with monitor roof loft, covered porch, and white trim

15×25 She Shed / Backyard Retreat

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Backyard prefab metal building gym in coastal teal with double barn doors and treadmill

15×25 Pump House / Well Shed

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×25 Pump House / Well Shed | Steel and Stud, From $5,550

12

15×25 Pump House / Well Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,350$5,550SAVE $800
or $116/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×25Pump House / Well Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×25 Pump House / Well Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Our 15×25 pump house / well shed fits 15-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Insulated steel housing for a well pump, pressure tank, water softener, or.

You’re viewing:Pump House / Well Shed·Size15×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,550$6,350Save $800
or as low as $116/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×25
15×25
this size
$5,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 375 sq ft enclosed
  • From $5,295
  • Insulation Ready
  • Lockable
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X25-PUMP-HOUSE-WELL-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×25 pump house / well shed.

15 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 15×25 pump house / well shed fits 15-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack15′ × 25′ · 375 sq ft shop

Pump House / Well Shed layout.

Our 15×25 pump house / well shed fits 15-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Insulated steel housing for a well pump, pressure tank, water softener, or septic controls. Locking walk-in door, vented eaves, and weather-rated panels protect equipment from freeze, theft, and wildlife.

💡 Pro tip:Pump House / Well Shed works well at 15×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×25 Pump House / Well Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pump House / Well Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
375 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pump House / Well Shed spec sheet.

Width15′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space375 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pump House / Well Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday pump house / well shed
Everyday pump house / well shed
375 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pump house / well shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpump house / well shed + seasonal storage
pump house / well shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×25 Pump House / Well Shed, what makes it different.

375sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$116/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×25 pump house / well shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $116/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×25?

375 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 25′ footprint with 375 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,000–$4,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pump House / Well Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×25 Pump House / Well Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×25 Pump House / Well Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pump House / Well Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,688+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pump House / Well Shed also viewed:

🏡 15×25

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×25 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×25

Backyard Workshop

15×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×25

Single Carport

15×25 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×25

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×25 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×25

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×25 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×25

Hobby Studio

15×25 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×25

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×25 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×25

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×25 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×25

Bike & Gear Storage

15×25 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×25

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×25 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×25

Backyard Office / Studio

15×25 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pump House / Well Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 15×25 pump house / well shed cost?

A 15×25 pump house / well shed from Steel and Stud starts at $5,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $116/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×25 pump house / well shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pump house / well shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×25 pump house / well shed?

Almost always for 375+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pump house / well shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×25 pump house / well shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×25 pump house / well shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×25 pump house / well shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $116/month on a 15×25 pump house / well shed.

What warranty comes with the 15×25 pump house / well shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×25 pump house / well shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 15×25 pump house / well shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 15×25 pump house / well shed typically adds $3,000–$4,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pump House / Well Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Backyard prefab metal building gym in coastal teal with double barn doors and treadmill

15×25 Pump House / Well Shed

375 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×25 steel building delivers 375 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Not Sure Which Size? Build Your Carport in 3D and See Your Price Instantly

Flexible Payment Options

3 Ways to Pay - Pick What Works

No need to pay full price today. Choose from standard deposit, easy monthly financing, or rent-to-own with zero credit check. Every option includes free delivery & professional installation.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

RV Covers Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

4-8 Weeks Current Lead Time — 127 Carports Ordered This Month Alone

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Carport

A prefabricated steel carport is the most cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, boats and equipment. Here is why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel carport order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees. Just confirm your site is level and we handle the rest.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. 14-gauge frames include a full workmanship warranty. Steel structures genuinely last decades.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work directly with multiple manufacturers, cutting out distributor markups. In most cases our prices beat the manufacturer's own direct pricing. 40-60% less than comparable wood or concrete construction.

🌞

12 Color Options Included

Choose from 12 standard powder-coat colors at no additional cost. Galvanized and primer finishes also available. Your color choice will not affect your price or lead time.

Engineered for Your Climate

All structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 12-gauge certified frames are available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

🔭

Multiple Manufacturers, One Source

We partner with multiple vetted manufacturers nationwide so you always get the closest installer, the fastest lead time, and competitive pricing for your specific location and climate zone.

Choose the Right Roof

Regular vs A-Frame vs Vertical Roof Carport

Selecting the right roof style affects weather performance, aesthetics, price and longevity. Here is how each option compares across key factors.

Regular / Horizontal

Most affordable, simple design

Lowest starting price
Fastest lead time
Moderate rain and snow shedding
Horizontal roof panels
Not ideal for heavy snow areas
Best for mild climates

Vertical Roof

Best performance, highest durability

Superior snow and rain shedding
Panels run vertically top-to-bottom
No standing water or debris ponding
Ideal for heavy snow regions
Price premium (+15%)
Recommended for all climates
Verified Reviews

What Our customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their RV Covers.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"Excellent to deal with — I feel fortunate Bill answered the phone when I called. He kept me informed of the order status from purchase through installation. Pleased with the quality and I would not hesitate buying again."

RB
Returning Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Carport
★★★★★

"Bill is a hard charger when it comes to customer service. I was amazed how quickly he returned my emails and phone calls, and followed up with the installation from start to finish. Highly recommend."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Custom Metal Building
★★★★★

"Bill was very helpful with the sales portion of my order — communication promptly answered, straightforward about delivery. The installation team were professional and met every challenge head on. A well-prepared site is key; I'm thankful for his advice on that."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Carport
Common Questions

RV Covers FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Although this can be done with one person, we recommend having at least two people on hand to ensure safety. You can enlist the help of as many people as you like. All tubular steel orders from Steel and Stud include professional installation by a certified crew, so you do not need to self-install unless you specifically choose a DIY kit.

Carports and More Inc. has manufacturers that install in 48 contiguous states. Parts of some states are not covered by the manufacturer used for online pricing. If an order is placed and your location is not in a covered area, we will call you with the correct pricing for your area before proceeding.

Absolutely. You can install the building yourself. In most states, there is a 5% discount for self-installed buildings. The materials can be delivered to your location or picked up at the nearest factory. Contact us for current availability and self-install options in your state.

Manufacturers aim to install units within a 4-week period from the time an approved order is received. In some cases it is done sooner; however, it can take longer depending on the time of year, your location, and seasonal demand. Areas with extreme winter weather may close temporarily. Buildings over 24 feet wide require special construction and can take longer to manufacture.

Most standard RV Covers units are constructed in just a few hours. It may take up to two days depending on the size and complexity of the building. Large triple-wide or commercial-span RV Covers may require a second day for proper installation and inspection.

The key to a successful installation is a flat, level surface. Site preparation and building permits are the responsibility of the customer. You have approximately 2 to 3 inches of adjustment available during installation to account for minor grade differences. If your lot is significantly out of level, materials to level the site must be on hand when the crew arrives.

Re-bar and pin anchors (1/2-inch diameter, 36-inch long) are included for ground and asphalt installations. Concrete anchor bolts are used on concrete slabs at no extra charge. Mobile home auger anchors are available for ground installation at an additional cost. In several states, units enclosed on three sides require a minimum of four mobile home augers for ground installations.

Yes. You have 12 standard colors to choose from at no additional charge. Color selection does not affect your price. Galvanized and primer finishes are also available. Your color selection is made at the time of order and cannot be changed after fabrication begins.

Permit requirements vary by city, county and state. You should contact your local building department before ordering. All permit requirements such as set-backs must be resolved before ordering because once engineering plans are sent, your deposit becomes non-refundable. Generic engineered plans are available in most states. States requiring building-specific plans and calculations include CO, ID, MT, ND, NE, NJ, OR, SD, UT, WA and WY. Contact us if you have questions about your area.

The vertical roof allows water, snow and debris to run off quickly without ponding. The vertical panel orientation prevents accumulation and is especially recommended in high snow-load areas. If you are in a state with significant annual snowfall or heavy seasonal rain, the vertical roof upgrade is strongly recommended even though it carries a modest price premium.

Sizes are shown as width x length x leg height. Width is measured from outside to outside of each base rail. Length is measured by the roof metal, which includes a 6-inch overhang on each end, so the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length. Height is measured by the actual leg on the outer wall. Standard-style roof units will be 1 foot taller at the sidewall than the selected leg height.

The frames are available in either 14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel tubing. The roof, side and end panels are 29-gauge steel with a painted finish. Galvanized frames provide corrosion resistance. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick; 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick. Lower gauge equals thicker, stronger steel.

14-gauge frame units carry a 30-day workmanship warranty. 12-gauge frames include both the 30-day workmanship warranty and a 20-year limited rust-through warranty on the framing, assuming normal user care and maintenance. Warranty coverage begins on the date of installation.

Yes; however, your deposit may not be fully refundable. You have 3 days from the date of order confirmation to cancel and receive a full refund. Cancellations must be in writing. After 3 days, deposits may be applied as credit toward any future purchase within 3 years. Deposits on custom-size units are non-refundable. Installation timing delays alone are not a valid reason for cancellation.

No. In most cases our prices are the same as or lower than ordering direct from the manufacturer. We work with multiple manufacturers and can often source your structure from the most competitive option for your location, size and timing, something a single manufacturer cannot do for you.

Yes. Extensions, lean-tos, sidewalls and doors can be added after installation, though there may be an additional service charge. If you plan to eventually enclose a RV Covers with walk-in or roll-up doors, your original leg height must be 6 feet or taller to allow for standard door frames.

Slab requirements vary by manufacturer. Please contact us before pouring your concrete slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement for your specific RV Covers model. Pouring the wrong size slab can delay installation.

12-foot legs are standard and available on all units. Longer legs may be available for special applications such as RV clearance or commercial-height requirements. Contact us if you need legs taller than 12 feet and we will confirm availability for your chosen structure type.

The balance due is paid directly to the manufacturer after your RV Covers is fully installed and you are satisfied. The manufacturer accepts cash, check and credit card. They will confirm accepted payment methods when they contact you to schedule installation. PayPal is not accepted directly by the manufacturer but can be arranged through Steel and Stud with applicable processing fees. If you prefer not to pay the full balance at once, ask about our monthly financing or rent-to-own (RTO) options — both are available and let you own your RV Covers with as little as the first month's payment down.

Yes — Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment — pay a deposit now, balance after install, zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing — competitive rates from $89/mo over 12–72 months with a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) — as low as $49/mo with no credit check required, first month's payment as the only down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. RTO is available on most residential RV Covers sizes. View all financing options →

Gauge refers to the thickness of the steel tubing: lower gauge means thicker steel. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick and is the stronger, more durable option backed by a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick, lighter and more affordable, carrying a 30-day workmanship warranty. For heavy snow loads, high winds or long-term investment, 12-gauge is always recommended.

Standard single-car RV Covers (12x21, 15x21) start at $1,195 with free delivery and installation on tubular steel orders. Two-car RV Covers (18x21, 20x21) range from $1,595 to $2,595 depending on roof style and gauge. Triple-wide RV Covers (24x29 and larger) start around $3,895. Large commercial spans (20x38+, 24x45+) start at $5,195 and up. Contact us for a precise quote including your location, size and options.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Carport Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

RV Covers Sizes and Dimensions Guide

RV Covers dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Width runs from 10 feet to 40 feet for standard tubular steel units. Length is effectively unlimited in increments. Leg height starts at 6 feet for standard single-car RV Covers and goes up to 12 feet as a standard option, with taller legs available on request.

Single-car RV Covers (12 to 15 feet wide, 21 feet long) are the most affordable option starting at $1,195. Two-car RV Covers (18 to 22 feet wide) are the most popular category, covering two standard vehicles with room to open doors. Triple-wide RV Covers (24+ feet wide) accommodate three vehicles, trucks, boats or large equipment.

When planning your site, remember that the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length due to 6-inch overhangs on each end. If you need exactly 40 feet of enclosed coverage, order a 41-foot length RV Covers. Contact our team to confirm the right dimensions before ordering.

How Much Does a RV Covers Cost in 2026?

RV Covers prices in 2026 range from $1,195 for a basic 12x21 single-car RV Covers up to $9,000 or more for a large 30x50 commercial-span structure. All tubular steel RV Covers prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider RV Covers cost more per linear foot), Length (additional bays add proportional cost), Leg Height (taller legs cost more), Roof Style (vertical adds ~15% over regular), and Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds ~12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty).

DIY RV Covers kits cost less because installation labor is excluded, but most property owners find the free professional installation included in tubular steel orders to be a significant value. A crew that installs 50 RV Covers per week consistently outperforms a first-time DIY attempt.

RV Covers Installation: What to Expect

After your order is confirmed and your deposit placed, the manufacturer assigns an installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days of ordering to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level surface (within 2-3 inches), clear access for a delivery truck, and any permit posted or available. Concrete pads are preferred but not required for ground or gravel installations. The installation crew typically completes a standard single or two-car RV Covers in 3 to 6 hours. Larger triple-wide or tall-clearance units may require a full day.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your RV Covers is installed and you are satisfied with the result. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Looking for something larger or more enclosed? Explore our full range: enclosed steel garages from $3,195, metal barns for agricultural use, tall clearance RV and boat covers, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and all commercial steel building types. Every product category includes the same factory-direct pricing and professional service.

Ready to Protect Your Vehicles with a Steel Carport?

Join 15,000+ property owners who chose Steel and Stud. Factory-direct pricing with free delivery and installation on all tubular steel orders.

View Cart